<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=CMO</id>
		<title>UBIK Wiki Test / Augmensys - User contributions [en]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=CMO"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/CMO"/>
		<updated>2026-04-30T00:24:36Z</updated>
		<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.24.2</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=View_Cache_Launcher&amp;diff=22092</id>
		<title>View Cache Launcher</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=View_Cache_Launcher&amp;diff=22092"/>
				<updated>2020-02-20T13:36:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* {{UBIK}} View Cache Launcher (VCL) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;={{UBIK}} View Cache Launcher (VCL)=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The VCL is an installable windows system service which can be used to automaically trigger one or more UBIK contexts(s) provided by an UBIK IIS service to build up its view cache.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After unpacking the VCL binaries and config-files, move the files to a directory where the local system account (or the specified one configured to run the VCL service) is allowed to execute the &amp;quot;install.bat&amp;quot;. This file installs the UBIK.VCL.exe as a service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The VCL is configured in “UBIK.VCL.exe.config&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* StatusURI: configure the service IP, the webservice path, appand context according to the installed UBIK-configuration on the IIS.&lt;br /&gt;
* TriggerUri: see StatusURI&lt;br /&gt;
* TriggerInterval: when the viewcache is already active, refresh it at least after this interval.&lt;br /&gt;
* OfflineCheckInterval: when the viewcache can not be contacted or is offline, retry to trigger the viewcache at least after this time interval.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;utf-8&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;configuration&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;startup&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;supportedRuntime version=&amp;quot;v4.0&amp;quot; sku=&amp;quot;.NETFramework,Version=v4.5.1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/startup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;appSettings&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;StatusUri&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;https://10.0.0.100/CLIENT/UBIK/CONTENT/UbikContent.svc/GetViewStateInformation/APP_001/CXT_001&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;TriggerUri&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;https://10.0.0.100/CLIENT/UBIK/CONTENT/UbikContent.svc/TriggerViewStateUpdate/APP_001/CXT_002&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;TriggerInterval&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;7200&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;OfflineCheckInterval&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;60&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;LogPath&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;D:\UBIK\LOG\VCL\log.txt&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/appSettings&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/configuration&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Configure more than one service and/or context to be updated====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please duplicate the entries used and add a number suffix. Here is an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;StatusUri1&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;https://10.0.0.100/UBIK/PROJECT01/CONTENT/UbikContent.svc/GetViewStateInformation/APP_001/CXT_001&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;StatusUri2&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;https://10.0.0.100/UBIK/PROJECT01/CONTENT/UbikContent.svc/GetViewStateInformation/APP_001/CXT_002&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
etc.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21734</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21734"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:38:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Final Settings */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use ''YourApp'' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: ''443; 777; 888;''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. ''your.auth-server.net'' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default ''300'' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: ''443; 777; 888;'' Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. ''your.content-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKContent.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. ''CXT_YourApp_001''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to ''Online''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set ''true'' changed Objects will be saved automatically. Otherwise, the User will be asked to save any changes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to ''true''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to ''false''. By default the field is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''80'', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''20'', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is ''300 px''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. ''your.push-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKPush.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false''. If set ''true'', it denotes that there is more than one View mode available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || If this boolean flag is set true, the Children of an Object are shown as Tiles. Otherwise they are shown as List items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to ''false'', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the ''Customizing'' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the ''Name'' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil=true'' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false'', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21733</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21733"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:37:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Connection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use ''YourApp'' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: ''443; 777; 888;''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. ''your.auth-server.net'' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default ''300'' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: ''443; 777; 888;'' Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. ''your.content-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKContent.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. ''CXT_YourApp_001''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to ''Online''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set ''true'' changed Objects will be saved automatically. Otherwise, the User will be asked to save any changes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to ''true''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to ''false''. By default the field is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''80'', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''20'', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is ''300 px''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. ''your.push-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKPush.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false''. If set ''true'', it denotes that there is more than one View mode available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || If this boolean flag is set true, the Children of an Object are shown as Tiles. Otherwise they are shown as List items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21732</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21732"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:37:04Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Connection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use ''YourApp'' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: ''443; 777; 888;''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. ''your.auth-server.net'' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default ''300'' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: ''443; 777; 888;'' Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. ''your.content-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKContent.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. ''CXT_YourApp_001''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set ''true'' changed Objects will be saved automatically. Otherwise, the User will be asked to save any changes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to ''true''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to ''false''. By default the field is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''80'', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''20'', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is ''300 px''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. ''your.push-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKPush.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false''. If set ''true'', it denotes that there is more than one View mode available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || If this boolean flag is set true, the Children of an Object are shown as Tiles. Otherwise they are shown as List items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21731</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21731"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:35:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Content */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set ''true'' changed Objects will be saved automatically. Otherwise, the User will be asked to save any changes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to ''true''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to ''false''. By default the field is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''80'', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''20'', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is ''300 px''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. ''your.push-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKPush.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false''. If set ''true'', it denotes that there is more than one View mode available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || If this boolean flag is set true, the Children of an Object are shown as Tiles. Otherwise they are shown as List items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21730</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21730"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:35:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Content */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set ''true'' changed Objects will be saved automatically. Otherwise the User will be asked to save any changes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to ''true''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to ''false''. By default the field is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''80'', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''20'', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is ''300 px''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. ''your.push-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKPush.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false''. If set ''true'', it denotes that there is more than one View mode available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || If this boolean flag is set true, the Children of an Object are shown as Tiles. Otherwise they are shown as List items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21729</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21729"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:33:59Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Content */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set '''''true''''' changed Objects will be saved automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to ''true''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to ''false''. By default the field is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''80'', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''20'', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is ''300 px''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. ''your.push-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKPush.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false''. If set ''true'', it denotes that there is more than one View mode available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || If this boolean flag is set true, the Children of an Object are shown as Tiles. Otherwise they are shown as List items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21728</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21728"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:33:37Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Content */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set '''''true''''' changed Objects will be saved automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''67'', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''33'', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to ''true''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to ''false''. By default the field is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''80'', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between ''0'' and ''100''. By default it is normally set to ''20'', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is ''300 px''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti ''true''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || ''To be filled out.''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. ''your.push-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKPush.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false''. If set ''true'', it denotes that there is more than one View mode available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || If this boolean flag is set true, the Children of an Object are shown as Tiles. Otherwise they are shown as List items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21727</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21727"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:30:41Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Push */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set '''''true''''' changed Objects will be saved automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to '''''true'''''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to '''''false'''''. By default the field is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. ''your.push-server.net'' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKPush.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false''. If set ''true'', it denotes that there is more than one View mode available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || If this boolean flag is set true, the Children of an Object are shown as Tiles. Otherwise they are shown as List items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21726</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21726"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:30:24Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Push */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set '''''true''''' changed Objects will be saved automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to '''''true'''''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to '''''false'''''. By default the field is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default ''https'' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. '''your.push-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be ''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc''. Make sure that the path points to the ''UBIKPush.svc'' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to ''false''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false''. If set ''true'', it denotes that there is more than one View mode available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || If this boolean flag is set true, the Children of an Object are shown as Tiles. Otherwise they are shown as List items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21725</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21725"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:28:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Session */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set '''''true''''' changed Objects will be saved automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to '''''true'''''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to '''''false'''''. By default the field is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. '''your.push-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKPush.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || By default this boolean field is set to ''false''. If set ''true'', it denotes that there is more than one View mode available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || If this boolean flag is set true, the Children of an Object are shown as Tiles. Otherwise they are shown as List items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21724</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21724"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T09:23:19Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Scan */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set '''''true''''' changed Objects will be saved automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to '''''true'''''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to '''''false'''''. By default the field is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. '''your.push-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKPush.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || Specifies a certain OCR Profile. Yet, in the client in the camera settings you can also specify the OCR Profile. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || If this field is set to ''true'', you can specify how a text based Code has to look like in the client settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether 2D-Codes, e.g. Barcode, QRCode, etc. can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || This numeric field denotes whether a normally locked object can be unlocked for changes for a certain amount of time (in seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ComboBoxSelectionIndex'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21722</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21722"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T08:46:36Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Content */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || If this boolean field is set '''''true''''' changed Objects will be saved automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to '''''true'''''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to '''''false'''''. By default the field is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. '''your.push-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKPush.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CodesTryHarder'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether Codes can be scanned and will be recognized. '''To review!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''TeachUnknownMarkers'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ComboBoxSelectionIndex'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21721</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21721"/>
				<updated>2019-10-01T07:55:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to '''''true'''''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to '''''false'''''. By default the field is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. '''your.push-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKPush.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CodesTryHarder'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether Codes can be scanned and will be recognized. '''To review!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''TeachUnknownMarkers'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal session settings control the behaviors and activities of a session. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AlternativeViewMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ComboBoxSelectionIndex'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ZoomedInMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Final Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
These final settings control the behaviors and activities of a profile. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''IsFavorite'' || This boolean field denotes whether the Profile will be shown as a favourite on top of a list when there are also other Profiles in the Application client available.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''LastUsed'' || Contains a Timestamp when this profile was used the last time. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''MultiUserMode'' || This boolean  field denotes whether Multi User Mode is allowed in the Application or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i. e. only one user can use the Application to check and also change values from the underlying Database.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Name'' || This field denotes the name of the Profile. Note: If there is no special folder named in the '''''Customizing''''' field, then this name here will also be taken to retrieve the XAMLs from the according Folder with the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Project'' || This field can name a special project. It might be common to have the carry the same name as the '''''Name''''' field. Carrying the value ''i:nil='''true''''' means that ...&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowHiddenSettings'' || By default this boolean field is set to '''''false''''', i.e. no hidden settings are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21720</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21720"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T14:36:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Scan */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to '''''true'''''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to '''''false'''''. By default the field is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. '''your.push-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKPush.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal scan settings control the behaviors and activities of scanned data. &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CodesTryHarder'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentBarcodeFormats'' || Refers to a Microsoft definition for QR Codes, denoted in [http://schemas.microsoft.com/2003/10/Serialization/Arrays]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''CurrentOCRProfileIndex'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PostProcessRegex'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanARMarker'' || This boolean field denotes whether an ARMarker can be scanned and will be recognized. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanCodes'' || This boolean field denotes whether Codes can be scanned and will be recognized. '''To review!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ScanOCR'' || This boolean field denotes whether an OCRMarker can be scanned and will be recognized.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''TeachUnknownMarkers'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''UnlockByScanTimeOut'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21719</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21719"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T14:18:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Content */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || Denotes whether a Document is truly displayed only inside of the Application, then the boolean field should be set to '''''true'''''. If there should be a preview of the Document available inside the Application only and the Document is to be opened by an external Application, the boolean field should be set to '''''false'''''. By default the field is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || Denotes whether a logging of different events, e.g. loading an object, changing a Property on an Object, etc. should take place. By default this boolean field is set to '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || Denotes whether the Children of an Object should be displayed in a ranking of geographic distance to the Parent Object. By default this boolean field is set ti '''''true'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. '''your.push-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKPush.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21718</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21718"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T14:01:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* General */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the automatic branch download below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic branch synchronization in minutes. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. '''your.push-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKPush.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21717</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21717"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T13:52:47Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Push==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ActivatePush'' || This boolean field denotes whether new resp. changed data should be pushed to other clients, which might be running the Application at the same time, or not. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPollingIntervalSeconds'' || Denotes the interval in seconds for the client to retrieve newly pushed data from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushPort'' || Denotes the Port Number to use when connecting to the Push Server (optional), might be set to the same Port number as the Content Port Number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Push might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushServer'' || Denotes the Push Server, e.g. '''your.push-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Content Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''PushService'' || Denotes the path on the Push Server to the Push Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/PUSH/UBIKPush.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKPush.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ShowPushMessage'' || This boolean field denotes whether the User is informed about an occurring Push, or not. By default it is set to '''''false'''''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scan==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal push settings control the behaviors and activities of pushed data. For general information see [[Push Service (Client)|{{UBIK}} Push Service]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21716</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21716"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T12:50:21Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Content */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AutoSaveMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Content Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ChildPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Content Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Content Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Children of an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''67''''', i.e. taking two thirds of the Details Page Area to display Children of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DetailsPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Details Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and its Children . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''33''''', i. e. taking one third of the Details Page Area to display Properties of a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentInternalMode'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPageChildrenPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between a Document lying beneath an Object and its Properties. Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''80''''', i.e. taking  80% of the Document Page Area to display a Document connected to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyPortion'' || Denotes the Portion of the visible Document Page Area that is split between the Properties of an Object and a Document belonging to it . Usually the value is between '''''0''''' and '''''100'''. By default it is normally set to '''''20''''', i. e. taking 20% of the Document Page Area to display Properties of a Document belonging to a given Object.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''DocumentPagePropertyWidth'' || Denotes the maximum width (in pixels) that Properties of a Document can take when a Document belonging to an Object is displayed. By default the value is '''''300 px'''''. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''EnableSyncLogging'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''GeoDistanceSorting'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''NextLevelClassificationPreload'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21715</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21715"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T12:20:44Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Connection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use '''YourApp''' as the name for an Application.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: '''''443; 777; 888;'''''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. '''your.auth-server.net''' could be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc'''. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout. By default '''''300''''' is retrieving a Timeout after 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default '''https''' is used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || Denotes the Content Server, e.g. '''your.content-server.net''' could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be '''YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc'''. Make sure that the path points to the '''UBIKContent.svc''' file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. '''CXT_YourApp_001'''. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || Denotes the Server for Remote Support.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to '''Online'''.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21714</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21714"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T12:15:07Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* General */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| Denotes which and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to '''0''' by default, i.e. it does not download lower levels automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''false''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || '''Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use &amp;quot;YourApp&amp;quot; as the name for an Application.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || '''Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888;'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.auth-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc&amp;quot;. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || '''Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || '''Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || '''Denotes the Content Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.content-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc&amp;quot;. Make sure that the path points to the UBIKContent.svc file.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || '''Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. &amp;quot;CXT_YourApp_001&amp;quot;. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.''' &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || '''Denotes the Server for Remote Support.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || '''Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to &amp;quot;Online&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21713</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21713"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T12:09:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Content */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| '''Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| '''Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| '''Denotes which, and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, ie. it does not download lower levels.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || '''Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use &amp;quot;YourApp&amp;quot; as the name for an Application.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || '''Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888;'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.auth-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc&amp;quot;. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || '''Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || '''Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || '''Denotes the Content Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.content-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc&amp;quot;. Make sure that the path points to the UBIKContent.svc file.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || '''Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. &amp;quot;CXT_YourApp_001&amp;quot;. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.''' &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || '''Denotes the Server for Remote Support.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || '''Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to &amp;quot;Online&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21712</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21712"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T12:07:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Connection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| '''Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| '''Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| '''Denotes which, and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, ie. it does not download lower levels.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || '''Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use &amp;quot;YourApp&amp;quot; as the name for an Application.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || '''Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888;'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.auth-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc&amp;quot;. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || '''Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || '''Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || '''Denotes the Content Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.content-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc&amp;quot;. Make sure that the path points to the UBIKContent.svc file.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || '''Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. &amp;quot;CXT_YourApp_001&amp;quot;. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.''' &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || '''Denotes the Server for Remote Support.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || '''Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to &amp;quot;Online&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21711</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21711"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T12:07:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Connection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| '''Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| '''Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| '''Denotes which, and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, ie. it does not download lower levels.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || '''Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use &amp;quot;YourApp&amp;quot; as the name for an Application.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || '''Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888;'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.auth-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc&amp;quot;. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || '''Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || '''Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || '''Denotes the Content Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.content-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. Could be the same server as the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc&amp;quot;. Make sure that the path points to the UBIKContent.svc file.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || '''Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. &amp;quot;CXT_YourApp_001&amp;quot;. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.''' &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || ''Denotes the Server for Remote Support.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || '''Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to &amp;quot;Online&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21710</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21710"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T12:01:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Connection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| '''Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| '''Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| '''Denotes which, and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, ie. it does not download lower levels.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || '''Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use &amp;quot;YourApp&amp;quot; as the name for an Application.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || '''Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888;'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.auth-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc&amp;quot;. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || '''Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || '''Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.content-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc&amp;quot;. Make sure that the path points to the UBIKContent.svc file.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || '''Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. &amp;quot;CXT_YourApp_001&amp;quot;. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.''' &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || '''Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to &amp;quot;Online&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21709</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21709"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T11:59:46Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| '''Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| '''Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| '''Denotes which, and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, ie. it does not download lower levels.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| Denote your specific folder for XAMLs that depict how the Content is displayed, here. If, by default, the value is set to ''i:nil='''true''''', then the specific XAML folder is denoted by the name of the Profile at the bottom of the Profile Description.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| This boolean field denotes whether the Metadefinitions are loaded whenever the Profile of the App is loaded anew or not. By default the value is set to '''''false''''', i.e. the Metadefinitions are only loaded when the Application is initialized the first time, or when all data has been purged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || '''Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use &amp;quot;YourApp&amp;quot; as the name for an Application.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || '''Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888;'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.auth-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc&amp;quot;. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || '''Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || '''Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.content-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc&amp;quot;. Make sure that the path points to the UBIKContent.svc file.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || '''Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. &amp;quot;CXT_YourApp_001&amp;quot;. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.''' &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || '''Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to &amp;quot;Online&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21708</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21708"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T11:18:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: /* Connection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preamble==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings should not be changed!&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''xml version''|| '''The XML version used to interpret the profile.Normally it is set to version &amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''encoding''|| '''Denotes the encoding used for the Profile. Normally it is set to &amp;quot;utf-8&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Profile''|| '''Denotes the schema, how the Profile will be set up afterwards, i.e. the structure and order of the different configurable options for (a) specific feature(s) in the Profile.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| '''Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| '''Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| '''Denotes which, and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, ie. it does not download lower levels.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Description''|| '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || '''Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use &amp;quot;YourApp&amp;quot; as the name for an Application.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || '''Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888;'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.auth-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc&amp;quot;. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || '''Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || '''Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the one for the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.content-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc&amp;quot;. Make sure that the path points to the UBIKContent.svc file.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || '''Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. &amp;quot;CXT_YourApp_001&amp;quot;. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.''' &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || '''Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to &amp;quot;Online&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21706</id>
		<title>Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wikitest.augmensys.com/index.php?title=Settings&amp;diff=21706"/>
				<updated>2019-09-30T10:01:50Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;CMO: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Android=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings list provides a list of all the settings that control the client environment, giving the user the possibility to display and configure these settings. The settings are ordered according to theme, the part of environment it's responsible for controlling. Within each theme the settings are sorted alphabetically. Mandatory settings are indicated with a {{key press|*}}  next to the name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All users have at least access to all settings statet in [[#List of settings|List of settings]]. Additional settings, namely the [[#AR settings|AR settings]] or [[#Demo settings|Demo settings]] are only available if the regarding plugin is part of the application built. {{Tip/Version|Since version 2.5.0 the former system of global settings and user-specific settings has been replaced by user-specific settings only.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List of settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic stock of settings includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for user authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthPortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the authentication server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AuthProtocol''|| The protocol to use for authentication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS). {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKAuthContentService''|| The name of the UBIK authentication service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''MemoryUsage''|| Whether {{UBIK}} should [[Memory Usage (Android)|lazy load]] or [[Memory Usage (Android)|eager load]] all the content. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.4.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Protocol''|| The protocol to use for data communication over the Internet (e.g.: HTTPS)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PortNumber''|| The port number to use when connecting to the content server (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UpdateExpirySeconds''|| The number of seconds one has to wait before the same update will be considered necessary. If an update of certain content has just ended successfully and is requested again within the amount of time configured in this setting, the client simply dismisses the new request. However, this setting does not affect [[Forced Updates in Manual Synchronization Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SyncMode''|| The possible values are '''Automatic''', '''Manual Commit''' and '''Offline'''. For more details, please refer to [[Sync Mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ShowSystemProperties''|| If set to true, all properties will be displayed; otherwise, only the ones that are marked as [[METACLASSSCOPE#Visibility|visible]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContextName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[CONTEXT]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKApplicationName''|| The {{UBIK}} [[APPLICATION]] name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''UBIKContentService''|| The name of the {{UBIK}} content service&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ServerName''|| The name of the server to connect to for fetching content&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpectSingleSearchResult''|| If checked, single search results will be displayed in the ContentBrowser immediately instead of being shown in the result list. Available since {{Version/Android|2.5.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AR settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
The AR plugin has additional settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CompassOffsetDegrees'' || The offset in degrees to change the magnetic north and therefore the orientation of the device (global setting).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Pose Estimation Systems''|| The different  pose estimation systems considered in the [[Location Manager]] can be activated or deactivated with this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SpatialiteDbPath''|| The path to the sqlite database containing the routing graph. It will be looked for on the public internal storage (Google calls that the &amp;quot;Primary External Storage&amp;quot;), which is NOT the SD-card.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''StandardMapZoomLevel''|| Specifies the zoom level, which should be applied when using the zoom features of the [[Map_View]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''DefaultMapZoomLocation''|| Specifies the position, which should be zoomed to when opening the [[Map_View]] after login.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities; also influences the scaling of billboards depending on their distance. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NFC Scan Result Type''|| Specifies the type of information, which should be extracted from scanned [[RFID tags]]. {{Version/AndroidSince|3.0.0}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demo settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the demo application and its unique user specific settings are listed as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''NumberPropertyEditor''|| Whether to use the normal keyboard or the [[UBIK Number Pickers]] for editing numeric properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''CurrentAltitude''|| The (mock) altitude in meters to use in Augmented Reality activities, for non-manual locations (e.g. GPS, since the altutide for this is too inaccurate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AltitudeOffset''|| The offset in meters to add to the current altitude in Augmented Reality activities (used for configuration of the device height)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentDistanceFilterThreshold''|| The threshold in meters up to which billboards are displayed in Augmented Reality activities&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentTarget''|| The actual Uri / Activity class / app package to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''SupportIntentType''|| The type of the target (URI/APP_PACKAGE/ACTIVITY_CLASS) to be opened as an Android intent when the support action is triggered. {{Version/AndroidSince|2.5.2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics of settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings have the following characteristics and behavior within the application:&lt;br /&gt;
* Available and editable before and after the login.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes done before login are applied to the next user who attempts to login.&lt;br /&gt;
** This goes for applying presets as well.&lt;br /&gt;
** After applying a preset, changes of settings are also applied.&lt;br /&gt;
** The settings defined are not just used by the user as new settings configuration, but are merged with the settings the user already has, and are overriding them. &lt;br /&gt;
* Changes after login are saved for the user currently logged in. After logout and new login, they are restored, merged with the settings changed before login if there are some and finally they get applied to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a completely new user attempts to login without defining settings before or loading a preset, the default values of the settings as defined for the respective app are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PreSet actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Load PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Load PreSet}} button can be used to [[HowTo:Load Presets]] onto the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save PreSets ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{key press|Save PreSet}} button that is only available after login, can be used to [[HowTo:Save Settings as Presets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WinX =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several categories of settings, each providing a group of configurable options for (a) specific feature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preamble==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings should not be changed!&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''xml version''|| '''The XML version used to interpret the profile.Normally it is set to version &amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''encoding''|| '''Denotes the encoding used for the Profile. Normally it is set to &amp;quot;utf-8&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Profile''|| '''Denotes the schema, how the Profile will be set up afterwards, i.e. the structure and order of the different configurable options for (a) specific feature(s) in the Profile.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
This initial section in the Profile description contains some general settings.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSync''|| '''Denotes whether the branch below an object will be synchronized automatically or not. It is set to &amp;quot;false&amp;quot; by default.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''AutoBranchSyncPeriod''|| '''Denotes the period for automatic synchronization in seconds. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, when the ''AutoBranchSync'' is set to false. Otherwise it should take an other figure.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''BranchDownloadSubLevels''|| '''Denotes which, and how many sublevels below a branch should be downloaded. Its value is set to &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; by default, ie. it does not download lower levels.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Customizing''|| '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Description''|| '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ExpertMode''|| '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Connection ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains properties to denote the internal connection settings of the App.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Application'' || '''Denotes the name of the Application that will be run, e.g. one could use &amp;quot;YourApp&amp;quot; as the name for an Application.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationPort'' || '''Denotes the Port used on the Authentication Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888;'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for Authentication might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.auth-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Authentication Server to the Authentication Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/USAM/USAM.svc&amp;quot;. In this case the User System Authentication Manager (USAM) is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''AuthenticationServiceConfig'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ConnectionTimeOut'' || '''Denotes the time in seconds when the Connection will be interrupted because of a Timeout.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentPort''  || '''Denotes the Port used on the Content Server. Default values might be: 443; 777; 888; Often it is the same port as for the Authentication Server.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentProtocol'' || '''Denotes which Transfer Protocol for the Content might be used. By default &amp;quot;https&amp;quot; is used.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentServer'' || '''Denotes the Authentication Server, e.g. &amp;quot;your.content-server.net&amp;quot; could be used. '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''ContentService'' || '''Denotes the path on the Content Server to the Content Service File, e.g. the path might be &amp;quot;YourFolder/YourApp/CONTENT/UBIKContent.svc&amp;quot;. Make sure that the path points to the UBIKContent.svc file.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''ContentServiceConfig''|| WSHttpBinding (the default value) or BasicHttpBinding. It should be set according to the [[Configuration_Files/Services.config|webservice configuration]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''Context'' || '''Denotes the name of the Context, e.g. &amp;quot;CXT_YourApp_001&amp;quot;. This context is specified inside UBIK and all the different Metadefintions are loaded from it.''' &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SignalingServer'' || '''To be filled out.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|''SyncMode'' || '''Denotes the Synchronization Mode of the Application. Possible Values are: Online, Offline, Auto; by default the SyncMode is set to &amp;quot;Online&amp;quot;.'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
These internal content settings control the behaviors and activities of the content data.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''PriorityThreshold''|| Any property with a priority number greater than this integer setting value is regarded as a high priority property and is highlighted when being displayed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Update Expiry''|| Determines how long (in seconds) freshly updated content becomes outdated and will be updated again when the user browses to it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''[[Content_Logging#Log_setting|Content Logging'']]|| Determines whether certain content related activities should be recorded as log files.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Augmented Reality ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maps ==&lt;br /&gt;
These settings control the behaviors of the [[Map View|map]] throughout the app.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Map Type''|| Determines which base map image will be used in the map.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Default Zoom Level''|| Controls how closely zoomed in the map should be whenever it is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Device''|| Specifies which camera to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Camera Resolution''|| Specifies which camera resolution to use in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Hint|The camera preview window in the settings is hidden when the camera is currently in use in e.g. the POI view or the scan view. However, a user can still change the relevant settings and see the immediate results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location ==&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; | width = &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Name!! Purpose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Calibration Heading''|| Specifies the heading that is used when manually calibrating the orientation sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;headertabs/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Client|Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>CMO</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>